SAP2 Ex SAFE

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻟﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺪ ﻣﻬﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﺟﻮﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺪ ﻣﻬﺪﻱ ﺩﺍﻭﺩﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐١‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٤ ......................................................................................................... SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫‪ ‐٢‐١‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٥ .................................................................................................. SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐١‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٦ ..............................................................................SAP2000‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐١‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٧ ...................................................... SAP2000 V9, 10 &11‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ‪٧ ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪٧ ...................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪٨ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٤‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪٩ ........................................................ Display > Show All Table Types...‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٤‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪١٢............................................................................... SAP2000‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐١‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪١٤.................................................................. SAP2000 V8.x‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ‪١٥.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪١٥.................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪١٦...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٥‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪١٦...................................................... Display > Show All Table Types...‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٥‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪٢٢............................................................................... SAP2000‬‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐١‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٢٤.................................................................. SAP2000 V7.x‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٦‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ‪٢٥.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٦‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪٢٥.................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٦‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪٢٥...................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٦‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪٢٦.................................................................... File > Print Input Tables...‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٦‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪٢٨................................................................. File > Print Output Tables...‬‬
‫‪ ‐٧‐١‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٣٠.............................................................................SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻲ‪٣١..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‪٣٦............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ‪٣٩.......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ( ‪٤٢..............................‬‬

‫‪ ‐٥‐٧‐١‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٤٦.........................................................................SAP2000‬‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٧‐١‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪٥٠............... SAP2000 V8.x‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٢‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ‪٥١....................................................................................‬‬

‫‪ ‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪٥٥.............................................. SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ‪٥٦....................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ ‪٥٦...................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٢‬ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ‪٥٧.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٣‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪٦٠..........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٦١....................................................................... SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪٦٥..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٦٥.......................................................................................................... SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٦٦........................................................................................................ UNITS‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ TITLE1‬ﻭ ‪٦٧................................................................................... TITLE2‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٦٧...................................................................................................... GRID‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٦٨............................................................................................. MESH MAX‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪٦٨............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٦٩.......................................................................................... BEAMPROP‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٢........................................................................................... SLABPROP‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٣.................................................................................... COLUMNPROP‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٦.......................................................................................... WALLPROP‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٧............................................................................................ SOILPROP‬‬

‫‪ ‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ‪٧٧..................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٧................................................................................................... POINT‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٨...................................................................................................... LINE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٩.................................................................................................... AREA‬‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪٨٠.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٠................................................................................................... BEAM‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨١..................................................................................................... SLAB‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨١............................................................................................. OPENING‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨١............................................................................................. COLUMN‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٢................................................................................................... WALL‬‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٢...................................................................................................... SOIL‬‬
‫‪ ‐٧‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٣.............................................................................................. RELEASE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ‪٨٣........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٣................................................................................................... LOAD‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٤........................................................................................ POINTLOAD‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٤......................................................................................... POINTDISPL‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٥........................................................................................... LINELOAD‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٥......................................................................................... AREALOAD‬‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COMBO‬ﻭ ‪٨٦.............................................................. COMBOFACTOR‬‬
‫‪ ‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪٨٧.........................................................‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ XSTRIP‬ﻭ ‪٨٧.................................................................................. YSTRIP‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٧................................................................................................. GROUP‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٨٨........................................................................................................... END‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐١‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻬﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺁﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓـﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Microsoft Office‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻧـﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﻣﻴـﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﻣﻮﺟـﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﺭﺁﻳﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﻣـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ‪ ١CSI‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧـﺮﻡﺍﻓــﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺷـﺮﻛﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ‪،SAFE ،ETABS ،SAP2000‬‬
‫‪ Section Builder‬ﻭ ‪ CSICOL‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋـﺚ ﺍﻓـﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻛـﺎﺭﺁﻳﻲ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺷـﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ،١‐١‬ﻧﺤــﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SAFE ،ETABS ،SAP2000‬ﻭ ‪ Section Builder‬ﻧـﻤﺎﻳـﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪SA‬‬
‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫‪P2‬‬
‫‪ex‬‬
‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪xP‬‬ ‫‪SA‬‬
‫‪SB‬‬ ‫‪FE‬‬
‫‪Section‬‬ ‫‪SBexPro‬‬
‫‪ETABS‬‬ ‫‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪Builder‬‬
‫‪Section Builder‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١‐١‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SAFE ،ETABS ،SAP2000‬ﻭ‬
‫__________________________________________________________________________‬
‫‐‪١‬‬ ‫‪Computers and Structures, Inc.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١‐١‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ ETABS‬ﻭ ‪ SAFE‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ETABS‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻫﻤـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ‪ Windows 9x‬ﻭ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢﻫـﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﻣـﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫‪ NT/Me/2000/XP‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐١‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺔ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪SAFE 8.x‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ 8.x‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻦﺁﺭﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﺑﻴـﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻦﺁﺭﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻨـﻲ« ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ »ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ« ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﺎﺭ ﻧﺸـﺴﺖ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺵ ﻣﻨﮕﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﻲﻫـﺎﻱ ﺗﻜـﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔـﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺵ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻃﻴﻔﻲ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷـﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤـﺖ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﭘﻲ ﻭ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ETABS‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﭘـﻮﺵ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽـﺔ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ SAFE‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐١‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2000‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺷـﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳـﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﺪﻝ ﺳـﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ SAP2000‬ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﭘﻼﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ X-Y‬ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳـﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﭘﻴـﺪﺍ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﺪﻝ ﺳـﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺣـﺴﺐ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺘﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﺧﻴـﺮﻩ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣـﺪﻝ ﻛﻨـﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ )ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAP2exSAFE‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺫﻛـﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺯﺓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )ﺩﺍﻝ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻲ( ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐١‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2000 V9, 10 &11‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000 V9, 10 & 11‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ‐٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫‪ ‐٣‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٤‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Display > Show All Table Types...‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺧﻄـﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﺧﻄـﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ "‪ "-MAX‬ﻭ "‪ "-MIN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻨـﺎﻇﺮ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﭘـﻮﺵ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗـﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺗـﺮﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢‐١‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪àâÔvÀ ÖH¬Y‬‬
‫‪gaBÓ ÊPrás‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘـﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAP2exSAFE‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻘﻴـﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٤‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Display > Show All Table Types...‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،Display > Show All Table Types...‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Choose Tables for‬‬
‫‪ Display‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.fÔw FCdPÐB CÚóÅBf ßBkI‬‬
‫‪.fÔw FCdPÐB CÚóàM ßBkI‬‬
‫‪Choose Tables for Display‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Select Analysis Cases...‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Select Output Cases‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٤‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪OK‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪Shift‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Select Output Cases‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺛـﺮﺍﺕ ‪،(P-Delta‬‬
‫ﻃﻴﻔﻲ ﻳـﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽـﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ Modify/Show Options‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ،٥‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Output Options‬ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪،Mode Shapes‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ All Modes‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺩﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪،Modal History Results‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Envelops‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﭘـﻮﺵ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽـﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Nonlinear Static Results‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Last Step‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Output Options‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Output Options‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٥‐١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Choose Tables for Display‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٦‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٦‐١‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ )ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭼﻨـﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﻱ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ ‪ Joint Reactions‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ Joint Displacements‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ Modify/Show Database Table Format‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٧‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÅÔÇs ÎâB ßÓj‬‬

‫®‪ÅkPÏÀ ÖH¬Y ÎâB gáâCQ OÌä‬‬ ‫‪.gáÏÀ ¾áÇÀ‬‬
‫‪.gâjBfkI Bj‬‬
‫‪Modify/Show Database Table Format‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٧‐١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪١٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Database Table Field Layout and Filters‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ‪Step‬‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،General‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ Include Field in Report‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٤‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨـﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ File‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻋـﻲ ‪ ،Display All Tables‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ ‪In Text Editor w/No‬‬
‫‪ Splits‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٨‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٨‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Text File Report‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٩‐١‬ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File name‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Open‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٩‐١‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ ،Open‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ١٠‐١‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ WordPad‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪WordPad‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٠‐١‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

١٤ SAP2exSAFE ‫ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬/ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ ﻗـﺎﺩﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬SAP2exSAFE ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﻫﻴـﺪ؛ ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬،WordPad ‫ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬.‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﻫﻤـﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬.‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
SAP2000 ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬١١‐١ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.txt) ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬V11.x

SAP2000 v11.0.4 8/17/03 23:09:26
Table: Analysis Case Definitions
Case Type InitialCond ModalCase

Text Text Text Text
DL LinStatic Zero
Modal LinModal Zero
TimeH LinModHist Zero Modal
Resp LinRespSpec Modal
Table: Joint Coordinates

Joint CoordSys CoordType XorR Y Z SpecialJt GlobalX GlobalY GlobalZ
Text Text Text in in in Yes/No in in in
1 GLOBAL Cartesian 0.000 -360.000 0.000 No 0.000 360.000 0.000

2 GLOBAL Cartesian 0.000 0.000 0.000 No 0.000 0.000 0.000
Table: Joint Reactions
Joint OutputCase CaseType U1 U2 U3 R1 R2 R3

Text Text Text Kip Kip Kip Kip-in Kip-in Kip-in
1 DL LinStatic 3.123E-16 5.216 145.004 -281.666 1.686E-14 0.000

1 TimeH LinModHist 1.149E-15 19.194 54.255 16727.744 1.261E-13 0.000
1 TimeH LinModHist -8.929E-15 -149.121 -528.301 -2105.636 -1.002E-12 0.000
1 Resp LinRespSpec 8.394E-16 14.019 68.310 1591.396 9.528E-14 0.000
2 DL LinStatic 0.000 -9.379E-09 311.992 -7.598E-06 0.000 0.000
2 TimeH LinModHist 1.724E-15 28.800 7.811E-13 22626.117 1.706E-13 0.000
2 TimeH LinModHist -1.344E-14 -224.529 -9.887E-13 -2849.473 -1.355E-12 0.000
3 DL LinStatic -3.123E-16 -5.216 145.004 281.666 -1.686E-14 0.000
SAP2000 V11 ‫‐ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬١١‐١ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
SAP2000 V8.x ‫‐ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬٥‐١

:‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬SAP2000 V8 ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬١
‫‐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬٢
‫‐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬٣
Display > Show All Table Types... ‫‐ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬٤
‫‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧـﻮﺍﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻃﻴـﻒ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞﻫـﺎﻱ ﻃﻴـﻒ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺩﺍﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﭘﻮﺵ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ "‪ "-MAX‬ﻭ "‪ "-MIN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻨـﺎﻇﺮ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﭘـﻮﺵ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻔﺖ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٢‐١‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٢‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﻣﻘﻴـﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳـﺐ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٥‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Display > Show All Table Types...‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،Display > Show All Table Types...‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Choose Data Tables‬‬
‫‪ to Display‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٣‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Choose Data Tables to Display‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٣‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Input Data‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Some‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Choose...‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Choose Model Definition Tables‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٤‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪Choose Model Definition Tables‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٤‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Geometry Data‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Joint Coordinates‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Analysis Cases‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Case Definitions‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Choose‬‬
‫‪ Data Tables to Display‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٥‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Choose Data Tables to Display‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٥‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Output Data‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Some‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Choose...‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Choose Analysis Results Tables‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٦‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪CÙÈBf‬‬
‫‪CÚóàM‬‬
‫‪à¿áÌCÏâf ÆáÇ`Q‬‬
‫‪Choose Analysis Results Tables‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٦‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗــﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Joint Output‬ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ ﭘــﻲﻫــﺎ ﺟﻌﺒــﺔ ﻛﻨﺘــﺮﻝ ‪ Reactions‬ﻭ ﺑــﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬــﺎ ﺟﻌﺒــﺔ ﻛﻨﺘــﺮﻝ‬
‫‪ Displacements‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ Select Analysis Cases‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Select Output Cases‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٧‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Select Output Cases‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٧‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨـﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺩﺍﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪Shift‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺠـﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ Choose Analysis Results Tables‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٦‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ‪ ،(P-Delta‬ﻃﻴﻔﻲ ﻳـﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽـﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ‬
‫‪ Modify/Show Options‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Output Options‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ١٨‐١‬ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Mode Shapes‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ All Modes‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺩﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻏﻴـﺮ ﻓﻌـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Modal History Results‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Envelops‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽـﺔ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ Nonlinear Static Results‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Last Step‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Output Options‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Output Options‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٨‐١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Output Options‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Choose Analysis Results Tables‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٦‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ ،OK‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Choose Data Tables to Display‬ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٩‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪àÐCÌl Ö\dâjCQ àÇáÇ`Q OÈCa ßBkI‬‬

‫‪.gáÏÀ FCdPÐB Bj ÔÏÌ ÎâB ,à¤e ká³ à¿áQCPsB Câ‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٩‐١‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫‪٢١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴـﺪ ﻣـﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ )ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﻱ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ ‪ Joint Reactions‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ Joint Displacements‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Format‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ Modify/Show Database Table Format‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٠‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Database Table Field Layout and Filters‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ‪ Step Type‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،General‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ Include Field in Report‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪OK‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ÅÔÇs ÎâB ßÓj‬‬

‫®‪ÅkPÏÀ ÖH¬Y ÎâB gáâCQ OÌä‬‬ ‫‪.gáÏÀ ¾áÇÀ‬‬
‫‪.gâjBfkI Bj‬‬
‫‪Modify/Show Database Table Format‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٠‐١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Database Table Field Layout and Filters‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ‪Step‬‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،General‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ Include Field in Report‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٥‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨـﻮﻱ‬
‫‪ File‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻋـﻲ ‪ ،Display All Tables‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ ‪In Text Editor w/No‬‬
‫‪ Splits‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١‐١‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢١‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Text File Report‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪،٢٢‐١‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File name:‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Open‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٢‐١‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ ،Open‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٣‐١‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ WordPad‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪WordPad‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٣‐١‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

٢٤ SAP2exSAFE ‫ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬/ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ ﻗـﺎﺩﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬SAP2exSAFE ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺪﻫﻴـﺪ؛ ﺯﻳـﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬،WordPad ‫ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬.‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﻫﻤـﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﻪ‬.‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
SAP2000 ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬٢٤‐١ ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬.‫( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬.txt) ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‬
.‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬V8.x

SAP2000 v8.2.5 8/17/03 23:09:26
Table: Analysis Case Definitions
Case Type InitialCond ModalCase

Text Text Text Text
DL LinStatic Zero
Modal LinModal Zero
TimeH LinModHist Zero Modal
Resp LinRespSpec Modal
Table: Joint Coordinates

Joint CoordSys CoordType XorR Y Z SpecialJt GlobalX GlobalY GlobalZ
Text Text Text in in in Yes/No in in in
1 GLOBAL Cartesian 0.000 -360.000 0.000 No 0.000 360.000 0.000

Table: Joint Reactions
Joint OutputCase CaseType U1 U2 U3 R1 R2 R3

Text Text Text Kip Kip Kip Kip-in Kip-in Kip-in
1 DL LinStatic 3.123E-16 5.216 145.004 -281.666 1.686E-14 0.000

2 DL LinStatic 0.000 -9.379E-09 311.992 -7.598E-06 0.000 0.000
2 TimeH LinModHist 1.724E-15 28.800 7.811E-13 22626.117 1.706E-13 0.000
2 TimeH LinModHist -1.344E-14 -224.529 -9.887E-13 -2849.473 -1.355E-12 0.000
3 DL LinStatic -3.123E-16 -5.216 145.004 281.666 -1.686E-14 0.000
SAP2000 V8 ‫‐ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬٢٤‐١ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬
SAP2000 V7.x ‫‐ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬٦‐١

:‫ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬SAP2000 V7.x ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬١
‫‐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬٢
‫‐ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬٣
File > Print Input Tables... ‫‐ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬٤
File > Print Output Tables... ‫‐ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬٥
‫‪٢٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٦‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٥‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪«SAP2000‬‬
‫‪ V8.x‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٦‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗـﺮﺍﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٦‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٥‐١‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ ﺩﻫﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣـﺸﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘـﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻮﺟـﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ؛ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٦‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪File > Print Input Tables...‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،File > Print Input Tables...‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Print Input Tables...‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٦‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪Print Input Tables‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٦‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Joint Data‬ﺟﻌﺒــﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ Coordinates‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴــﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬـﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬــﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Select Loads‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Select‬‬
‫‪ ،Load Conditions‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٧‐١‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٧‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕـﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Shift‬ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Print Input Tables‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ Selection Only‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴـﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Print to File‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳـﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ File Name‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٨‐١‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٨‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫‪٢٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Print Input Tables‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ‬
‫‪ Save‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٦‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪File > Print Output Tables...‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،File > Print Output Tables...‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Print Output Tables...‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٩‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪:‬‬
‫‪CÙÈBf‬‬
‫‪CÚóàM‬‬
‫‪Print Output Tables‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٩‐١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Type of Analysis Results‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Displacements‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Reactions‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻴـﻒ ﭘﺎﺳـﺦ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Select Loads‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Select Outputs‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٣٠‐١‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٠‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٠‐١‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ‪ EQX ،LL ،DL‬ﻭ ‪ EQY‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ‪ SPEC1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽـﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ HIST1‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Print Output Tables‬‬
‫)ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (٢٩‐١‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ Selection Only‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺗﺄﻳﻴـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺒ ﹰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ Append‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Print to File‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File Name‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﺔ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣١‐١‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAP2000 v7.44 File: II6‬‬ ‫‪Kgf-m Units‬‬ ‫‪PAGE 1‬‬
‫‪9/14/02 9:57:14‬‬
‫‪S T A T I C‬‬ ‫‪L O A D‬‬ ‫‪C A S E S‬‬
‫‪STATIC‬‬ ‫‪CASE‬‬ ‫‪SELF WT‬‬

‫‪CASE‬‬ ‫‪TYPE‬‬ ‫‪FACTOR‬‬
‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪DEAD‬‬ ‫‪1.0000‬‬

‫‪LL‬‬ ‫‪LIVE‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪EQX‬‬ ‫‪QUAKE‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪EQY‬‬ ‫‪QUAKE‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬

‫‪9/14/02 9:57:14‬‬
‫‪J O I N T‬‬ ‫‪D A T A‬‬
‫‪JOINT‬‬ ‫‪GLOBAL-X‬‬ ‫‪GLOBAL-Y‬‬ ‫‪GLOBAL-Z‬‬ ‫‪RESTRAINTS‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE-A‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE-B‬‬ ‫‪ANGLE-C‬‬
‫‪Mbo‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬
‫‪Mx‬‬ ‫‪3.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬
‫‪Mr‬‬ ‫‪9.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬
‫‪Mn‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪5.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬
‫‪Mmmm‬‬ ‫‪3.00000‬‬ ‫‪5.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬
‫‪Mlow‬‬ ‫‪9.00000‬‬ ‫‪5.00000‬‬ ‫‪0.00000‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬ ‫‪0.000‬‬

‫‪9/14/02 9:58:24‬‬
‫‪J O I N T‬‬ ‫‪D I S P L A C E M E N T S‬‬
‫‪JOINT‬‬ ‫‪LOAD‬‬ ‫‪U1‬‬ ‫‪U2‬‬ ‫‪U3‬‬ ‫‪R1‬‬ ‫‪R2‬‬ ‫‪R3‬‬
‫‪Mbo‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪-5.589E-06‬‬ ‫‪-2.462E-06‬‬ ‫‪-5.805E-04‬‬ ‫‪1.234E-05‬‬ ‫‪9.060E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬

‫‪Mbo‬‬ ‫‪LL‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪1.606E-05‬‬ ‫‪-1.233E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.102E-05‬‬ ‫‪7.086E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪Mbo‬‬ ‫‪EQX‬‬ ‫‪2.602E-03‬‬ ‫‪3.425E-04‬‬ ‫‪3.701E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.316E-05‬‬ ‫‪3.184E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.015E-05‬‬
‫‪Mbo‬‬ ‫‪EQY‬‬ ‫‪1.419E-04‬‬ ‫‪2.141E-03‬‬ ‫‪4.425E-04‬‬ ‫‪-7.525E-06‬‬ ‫‪5.320E-05‬‬ ‫‪1.585E-05‬‬
‫‪Mx‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪-5.589E-06‬‬ ‫‪-2.680E-06‬‬ ‫‪-9.529E-04‬‬ ‫‪-3.786E-05‬‬ ‫‪7.698E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬

‫‪Mx‬‬ ‫‪LL‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪1.606E-05‬‬ ‫‪-3.995E-04‬‬ ‫‪-7.962E-05‬‬ ‫‪6.736E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪Mx‬‬ ‫‪EQX‬‬ ‫‪2.602E-03‬‬ ‫‪2.740E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.133E-04‬‬ ‫‪-3.101E-05‬‬ ‫‪1.751E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.015E-05‬‬
‫‪Mx‬‬ ‫‪EQY‬‬ ‫‪1.419E-04‬‬ ‫‪2.195E-03‬‬ ‫‪2.935E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.968E-04‬‬ ‫‪3.427E-05‬‬ ‫‪1.585E-05‬‬
‫‪Mr‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪-5.589E-06‬‬ ‫‪-3.064E-06‬‬ ‫‪-9.481E-04‬‬ ‫‪-6.907E-05‬‬ ‫‪-8.643E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬

‫‪Mr‬‬ ‫‪LL‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪1.606E-05‬‬ ‫‪-4.277E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.014E-04‬‬ ‫‪-5.960E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪Mr‬‬ ‫‪EQX‬‬ ‫‪2.602E-03‬‬ ‫‪1.531E-04‬‬ ‫‪5.379E-04‬‬ ‫‪-7.616E-05‬‬ ‫‪-1.124E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.015E-05‬‬
‫‪Mr‬‬ ‫‪EQY‬‬ ‫‪1.419E-04‬‬ ‫‪2.290E-03‬‬ ‫‪2.552E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.541E-04‬‬ ‫‪9.858E-06‬‬ ‫‪1.585E-05‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Mn‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪-5.589E-06‬‬ ‫‪-3.282E-06‬‬ ‫‪-5.814E-04‬‬ ‫‪-9.947E-05‬‬ ‫‪-3.585E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬

‫‪Mn‬‬ ‫‪LL‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪1.606E-05‬‬ ‫‪-2.241E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.092E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.083E-05‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪Mn‬‬ ‫‪EQX‬‬ ‫‪2.602E-03‬‬ ‫‪8.454E-05‬‬ ‫‪1.148E-03‬‬ ‫‪-1.732E-04‬‬ ‫‪3.936E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.015E-05‬‬
‫‪Mn‬‬ ‫‪EQY‬‬ ‫‪1.419E-04‬‬ ‫‪2.344E-03‬‬ ‫‪2.037E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.537E-04‬‬ ‫‪3.170E-05‬‬ ‫‪1.585E-05‬‬
‫‪Mmmm‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪-5.558E-06‬‬ ‫‪-3.349E-06‬‬ ‫‪-5.659E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.005E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.100E-06‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬

‫‪Mmmm‬‬ ‫‪LL‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪1.606E-05‬‬ ‫‪-2.143E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.103E-04‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪Mmmm‬‬ ‫‪EQX‬‬ ‫‪2.600E-03‬‬ ‫‪6.338E-05‬‬ ‫‪5.960E-04‬‬ ‫‪-8.765E-05‬‬ ‫‪6.323E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.015E-05‬‬
‫‪Mmmm‬‬ ‫‪EQY‬‬ ‫‪1.416E-04‬‬ ‫‪2.361E-03‬‬ ‫‪1.669E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.508E-04‬‬ ‫‪3.669E-05‬‬ ‫‪1.585E-05‬‬
‫‪Mlow‬‬ ‫‪DL‬‬ ‫‪-5.569E-06‬‬ ‫‪-3.416E-06‬‬ ‫‪-5.642E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.016E-04‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬

‫‪Mlow‬‬ ‫‪LL‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪1.606E-05‬‬ ‫‪-2.133E-04‬‬ ‫‪-1.114E-04‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬ ‫‪0.0000‬‬
‫‪Mlow‬‬ ‫‪EQX‬‬ ‫‪2.600E-03‬‬ ‫‪4.222E-05‬‬ ‫‪-2.998E-05‬‬ ‫‪-2.133E-06‬‬ ‫‪6.174E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.015E-05‬‬
‫‪Mlow‬‬ ‫‪EQY‬‬ ‫‪1.415E-04‬‬ ‫‪2.378E-03‬‬ ‫‪1.311E-04‬‬ ‫‪-2.480E-04‬‬ ‫‪3.374E-05‬‬ ‫‪1.585E-05‬‬
‫‪SAP2000 V7‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣١‐١‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴـﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘـﻲﻫـﺎ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ )ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ( ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.f2k‬ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ »ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ «SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ »ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ« ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٧‐١‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﺶ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻣﻲﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٢‐١‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٢‐١‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪Single Footing‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪٣١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪Basemat‬‬ ‫•‬

‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫‪Slab‬‬ ‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪Fmax‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪Fmin‬‬ ‫‪Display Forces‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫‪Merge SAP2000 Files‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬ ‫‪V7‬‬ ‫‪V8‬‬

‫‪SAP2000 V7 to V8 Convert‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000 V8.x‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻲ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Single Footing Properties‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٣‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Single Footing Properties‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٣‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﭘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Single Footing Properties‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : SAP2000 .txt File Operations‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺣـﻞ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣـﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Open SAP2000 .txt File...‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺭﻭﻱ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪SAP2000 Output File Info‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ SAP2000 Output File Info‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﻲ‬
‫‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﻭ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٤‐١‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAP2000 Output File Info‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٤‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Load/Column Area‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻـﻠﺐ ﺳـﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣـﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Generate Load/Column Area‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ )ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ( ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : X Dimension‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Y Dimension‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Assign to Group‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﺎﺣﻴـﺔ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻭﻳـﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨـﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ X Dimension‬ﻭ ‪ Y Dimension‬ﺑﺎﻳـﺪ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺎﺱ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAP2exSAFE‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ .F2K‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴـﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﮔـﺮﻭﻩ ) > ‪Select‬‬
‫‪ (Select > Groups...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳـﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Assign‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Footing Area‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Generate Footing Area‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﻜـﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩﻥ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﭘﻲ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : X Dimension‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Y Dimension‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Assign to Group‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﭘﻲﻫـﺎ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Additional Support Moments‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Generate Mxx‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،X‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬـﺖ ‪Y‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ،Y‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﺑﻴـﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ »ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ« ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ »ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ« ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Generate Myy‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤـﻮﺭ ‪ ،Y‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : Footing Depth‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : X,Y Grids‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤـﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺷـﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳـﻴﻢ ﺑـﻪ ﻣـﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Generate X Grids‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،Y‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Generate Y Grids‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،X‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Select Columns‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻛﻤـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Select Columns‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٥‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﭼﭗ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺱ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Select Columns‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Select Columns‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴـﺔ ﺳـﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺧـﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ )ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﺱ( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻴﺮﺍﻣـﻮﻥ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫)ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﻀﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺠـﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Units‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،(.f2K‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Save Types‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ : Separate SAFE .f2k Files‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪،(.f2k‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳـﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File name:‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻭﻳـﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪File‬‬
‫‪ name:‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Test‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﮔـﺮﺓ ‪ M10‬ﻋﺒـﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ TestM10.f2k‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Single SAFE .f2k File‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.f2k‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File name:‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣـﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Basemat Properties‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪٣٦‐١‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Basemat Properties‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٦‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﭘﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Basemat Properties‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Open SAP2000 .txt File...‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫‪ : Additional Support Moments‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Generate Mxx‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،X‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬـﺖ ‪Y‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Generate Myy‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،Y‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬـﺖ ‪X‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Footing Depth‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Generate X Grids‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : Generate Y Grids‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،X‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬

‫‪ : Units‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،(.F2K‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻳﻜـﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪،SAFE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠـﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Save SAFE .f2k File‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،(.f2k‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File name:‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪،SAP2000‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Slab Properties‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪٣٧‐١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Slab Properties‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٧‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺻﻠﺐ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Slab Properties‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Open SAP2000 .txt File...‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫‪ : Drop Panel Area‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ : Generate Drop Panel Area‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ ﺳـﻄﺤﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : X Dimension‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Y Dimension‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Assign to Group‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪ ﺑـﻪ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Generate X Grids‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬

‫‪ : Generate Y Grids‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ،X‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬

‫‪ : Units‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،(.F2K‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﺸﻮﻳﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻳﻜـﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪،SAFE‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠـﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Save SAFE .f2k File‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪) SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،(.f2k‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File name:‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻗﺒﻠـﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ(‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻲﻫـﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﻮﻟـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫‪Fmax‬‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Define Load‬‬ ‫‪Fmin‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ‬
‫‪ Combinations and Display Diagrams‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٨‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪Define Load Combinations and Display Diagrams‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٨‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻌﺒـﻪ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Define Load Combinations and Display Diagrams‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪ : Open SAP2000 .txt File...‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٥‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟـﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﮔـﺮﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Load Combinations List‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻧـﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒـﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Click to‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Add New Combo...‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤـﻪ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Load Combinations‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٩‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Load Combination‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٩‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Load Combination‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻭﻳـﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ Load Combination Name‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ‪Load Combinations‬‬ ‫‬
‫‪ List‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳـﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ Load Factor‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Define Load‬‬ ‫‬
‫‪ ،Combinations and Display Diagrams‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﻧـﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Load Combinations List‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Modify Combo...‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Load Combinations List‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﻛﻤـﻪ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Load Combination‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳـﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Delete Combo‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒـﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﺁﻧـﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Load Combinations List‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣٩‐١‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﭘـﻮﺵ ﻣﺜﺒـﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜـﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻔﻜﻴـﻚ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ "‪–"MAX‬ﻭ "‪ "MIN‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﭽﺔ ﺯﻣـﺎﻧﻲ ‪ TH‬ﺑﺎﻋـﺚ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Select Diagrams‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﻟﻔـﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳـﻲ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Mx ،F‬ﻭ ‪ My‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﺰﻣـﺎﻥ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ Load Combinations List‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ )‪ Mx ،F‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ (My‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ Show Diagrams‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Display Forces and Moments Diagrams‬ﻣﻄـﺎﺑﻖ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٤٠‐١‬ﻇـﺎﻫﺮ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display Forces and Moments Diagrams‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤٠‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬

‫‪٤٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ ‪ Show Diagrams‬ﻣﻘـﺎﺩﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪F‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪ Mx‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ X‬ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘـﺮﻝ ‪ My‬ﻣﺘﻨـﺎﻇﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Display Forces and Moments Diagrams‬ﻣﻘـﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺣـﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻭ ﺣـﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Select Table‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )‪ Mx ،F‬ﻭ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ (My‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻩﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ ‪ Load Combinations List‬ﺑـﺎ ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ )‪ Mx ،F‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ (My‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Show Table‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٤١‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ )‪ Display Forces or Moments Tables (F‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display Forces or Moments Tables‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤١‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٧‐١‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2000‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ﭘـﻲﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳـﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Merge‬‬ ‫ﻳﻚ ﭘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤـﺔ‬
‫‪ SAP2000 .Txt Files‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٤٢‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﺓ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫•‬
‫‪Merge SAP2000 .Txt Files‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤٢‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Merge SAP2000 .Txt Files‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : SAP2000 .Txt Files List‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﺳـﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Click to‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ : Add Files to List...‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ : Remove File from List‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﺁﻧـﺮﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ SAP2000 .Txt Files List‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Merge Files...‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪،SAP2000 .Txt Files List‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ‪ File name‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Transformation Parameters‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻲ ﻣـﺆﺛﺮ ﺑـﺮ ﻣﺨﺘـﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺍﺑﺘـﺪﺍ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳـﺖ‬
‫‪ SAP2000 .Txt Files List‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒـﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ﻭﻳـﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫⎤ ‪⎡ X t ⎤ ⎡ cos(Teta) − sin(Teta) ⎤ ⎡ X a − X (c.r) ⎤ ⎡ DeltaX‬‬

‫⎥ ‪⎢ Y ⎥ = ⎢ sin(Teta) cos(Teta) ⎥ ⎢ Y − Y ⎥ + ⎢ DeltaY‬‬
‫⎣ ⎦‪⎣ t‬‬ ‫‪⎦⎣ a‬‬ ‫⎦ )‪(c.r‬‬ ‫⎣‬ ‫⎦‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪DeltaY‬‬
‫‪DeltaX‬‬
‫‪Teta‬‬
‫‪c.r‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ X c.r ،‬ﻭ ‪ Yc.r‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪ X a ،‬ﻭ ‪ Ya‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻭﻟﻴـﻪ )ﻛـﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﮕﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ Teta ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ‪ DeltaX ،‬ﻭ ‪ DeltaY‬ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﺠـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ ، Y‬ﻭ ‪ X t‬ﻭ ‪ Yt‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،۴۳‐۱‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫¸‪.gwCIàÌ L kIBkI y Ó x OÙY Óf jf CÙÐÔPs àÌCËQ ÖÇ{C‬‬

‫‪.gÏwCIóàÌ C Ó B ,A ßCÚó×lCs NCzPdÌ ÊPrás ABgHÌ Æ`Ì C1 Ó B1 ,A1‬‬
‫‪X (c.r) = -2L‬‬

‫‪Y (c.r) = -L‬‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪Teta = 90‬‬
‫‪DeltaX = 4L‬‬
‫‪C1‬‬
‫‪DeltaY = 3L‬‬
‫‪C1‬‬
‫‪B1‬‬
‫‪X (c.r) = 0‬‬
‫‪Y (c.r) = 0‬‬
‫‪Teta = 90‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪DeltaX = 0‬‬
‫‪DeltaY = 3L‬‬
‫‪B1‬‬
‫‪A1‬‬
‫‪X (c.r) = 0‬‬

‫‪Y (c.r) = 0‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪Teta = 0‬‬
‫‪A1‬‬ ‫‪DeltaX = 0‬‬
‫‪DeltaY = 0‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤٣‐١‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ : Output Type‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ )ﺩﺍﻝ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬
‫‪ : Basemat‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﭘﻲ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫‪ : Slab‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫‪e‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴـﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000‬ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛـﺎﺭ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠـﻒ ﺭﺍ ﺗـﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺗﻜـﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﻚ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑـﺎ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻧـﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﻨﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ /‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٧‐١‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000 V8.x‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﻗـﺎﺩﺭ ﺑـﻪ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪SAP2000 V7‬‬ ‫‪V7‬‬ ‫‪V8‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ to V8 Convert‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٤٤‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAP2000 V7 to V8 Convert‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤٤‐١‬ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Browse...‬ﻛﻠﻴـﻚ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000 V7.x‬ﻧـﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﺔ ‪ Convert...‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ SAP2000 V7.x‬ﺑـﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ ،SAP2000 V8.x‬ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻃﻴﻒ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٢‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ‬

‫ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴـﺐ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳـﺎﻳﺮ ﻗـﺴﻤﺖﻫـﺎﻱ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛـﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺳـﺎﺯﻩ ﺑـﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﻄﺢ ﭘـﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗـﺮﻱ ﻧـﺴﺒﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻙ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١‐٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺳﻪ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺩﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻗـﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻘﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺎ ‪ B ،A‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٢‬ﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑـﺮ ﻃﺒﻘـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
٥٢ SAP2exSAFE ‫ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬/ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
A
A A
A
B
B B
C C
( ÈB)
Z
àÇz¶Ì ×CÄóØá¿Q
Y X jBfkáÄ ×CÄóØá¿Q
B
B B
B
(F)
‫‐ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ‬١‐٢ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫‪٥٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺳـﺎﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘـﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪٢‐٢‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑـﺮ ﻃﺒﻘـﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻗـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﻭﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤـﺎﻅ ﺩﻗـﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳـﻄﺢ ﺑـﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ )ﺑﺠﺰ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻜﻒ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﺻـﻔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪F3 = α1A + α 2B‬‬

‫‪M 2 = γ 1A + γ 2B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪M 1 = β1A + β 2B‬‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ‬

‫‪٥٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢‐٢‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ )‪ A‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ (B‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫـﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷـﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﻔـﺮﻭﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺸﺴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑـﺮ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻋﻤـﺎﻝ ﻣـﻲﮔـﺮﺩﺩ )ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٣‐٢‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪U 3 = α1A + α 2B + α 3C‬‬

‫‪R2 = γ 1A + γ 2B + γ 3C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬
‫‪R1 = β1A + β 2B + β 3C‬‬

‫‪B‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٣‐٢‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻛـﻞ ﺳـﺎﺯﻩ )‪ B ،A‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ (C‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ 6.x‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ 7.x‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻣﺪﻟـﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧـﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺳـﺔ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑـﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺳـﺔ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑـﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻛـﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳـﻖ ﺳـﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻘـﺔ ﻓﻮﻗـﺎﻧﻲ ﺑـﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨـﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻌـﺮﻑ ﺳـﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻋﻤـﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧـﺮﻡﺍﻓـﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺳـﺎﺯﻩ‬
‫)ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (ETABS‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺳـﺔ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ‬ ‫•‬
‫ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑـﺮ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬـﺎ ﻧﻴـﺰ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﺓ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﺳـﺎﺯﻩ )ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻳـﺎ ‪ (ETABS‬ﺑﺪﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ )ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ( ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻨـﺸﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻒﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺁﺭﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻـﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،ETABS 8.x‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ 7.x‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ETABS‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑـﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬـﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺳـﻮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2exSAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﺫﺧﻴـﺮﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ‬
‫‪ SAP2000‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻬـﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟـﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺍﻟﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑـﺘﻦﺁﺭﻣـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،١‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻧﺸﺴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴـﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ ﻣـﺪﻝ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﻨـﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ‐١‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﺸﺴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪U3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫‪UZ ،SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪R1 ،X‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪RX ،X‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪R2 ،Y‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪RY ،Y‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪UZ = −U3‬‬ ‫‪RX = R1‬‬ ‫‪RY = R2‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸـﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﺑـﻪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ −Z‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘـﺎﻝ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻫـﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟـﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑـﻪ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻣﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘـﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻋﻜـﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻦﺁﺭﻣـﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ،٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤـﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺑـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAP2000‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ‐٢‐٢‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪F3‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫‪FZ ،SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪M1 ،X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪MX ،X‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪M2 ،Y‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪MY ،Y‬‬ ‫ﻟﻨﮕﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬
‫‪FZ = F3‬‬ ‫‪MX = −M1‬‬ ‫‪MY = −M2‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪) SAP2000‬ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﭘـﻲ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻫﻢ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻫـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ −Z‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﻜـﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴـﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻢ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ( ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٢‬ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫـﺮ ﺍﻟﻤـﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳـﻚ ﺍﻟﻤـﺎﻥ ﺧﻤـﺶ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﻙ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳـﺎﺱ ﺗﺌـﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻼﺳـﻴﻚ ﺧﻤـﺶ ﺻـﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﭘﻲﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺯﺓ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫـﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷـﻲ ﺗﻜﻴـﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨـﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗـﺎﺏ ﻧـﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٤‐٢‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳـﺪ‪ .‬ﻣـﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤‐٢‬ﺍﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤‐٢‬ﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬
‫)‪(µÈB‬‬
‫‪F1‬‬ ‫‪F2‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪M x,max = F2 × h‬‬

‫‪M y ,max = − F1 × h‬‬
‫)‪(F‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤‐٢‬ﻗﺎﺏ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ‪M x ,max‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ M y ,max‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻫﻨﮕـﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻲ ﺗﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAP2exSAFE‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺔ ‪ Generate Mxx‬ﻭ ﻳـﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ‬
‫‪ Generate Myy‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Additional Support Moments‬ﻋﻼﻣـﺖ ﺑﺰﻧـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ﻣﻘـﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﻬـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ /‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬
‫‪M x = − M 1 + F2 × h‬‬
‫‪M y = − M 2 − F1 × h‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ F1 ،‬ﻭ ‪ F2‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻋﻜـﺲﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷـﻲ ﺗﻜﻴـﻪﮔـﺎﻫﻲ‪ M 1 ،‬ﻭ ‪ M 2‬ﻣﻘـﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻭ ‪ M x‬ﻭ ‪ M y‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٣‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑـﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ )ﺑـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ (.FDB‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ )ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.F2K‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣـﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ‬
‫‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠـﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻠﻴـﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣـﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﻳـﺴﺖ ﻣـﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﹰﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﻣـﻮﻗﺘﻲ ﺑـﺰﺭﮒ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛـﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ )ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.FDB‬ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑـﻪ ﺫﻛـﺮ ﺍﺳـﺖ ﻛـﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑـﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﻣـﻮﻗﺘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻣـﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ File > Save‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛـﺎﺭ ﭘـﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .F2k‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬـﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ‬
‫‪٦١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬـﺎ ﺳـﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﻋـﻲ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤـﺎﺕ ﭘـﻴﺶ ﻓـﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻛـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ > ‪Options‬‬
‫‪ Preferences...‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳـﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨـﺪ ﺗﻨﻈـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑـﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺻــﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣــﻪ ﺫﺧﻴــﺮﻩ ﻣــﻲﺷــﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠــﺎﻳﻲ ﻛــﻪ ﻓﺎﻳــﻞ ﻣﺘﻨــﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋــﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣــﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳــﻂ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺷﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻣﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ > ‪File > Export‬‬
‫‪ ،SAFE .F2K File‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪ File > Import > SAFE v6/V7 .F2K File‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ )ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.FDB‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣـﺪﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﭙﻲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAFE‬‬

‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠـﺎﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ ﭼـﺎﭖ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Space‬ﻭ ‪) Tab‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ‪ (Space‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﻲ ‪ ASCII‬ﺫﺧﻴـﺮﻩ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨـﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻫـﺎﻱ ﺍﺿـﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫـﺮ ﺧـﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ 500‬ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ﺷـﺎﻣﻞ ﻳـﻚ ﻳـﺎ ﭼﻨـﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨـﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ١‐٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻠـﻲ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ‐١‐٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪UNITS‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪TITLE2‬‬ ‫‪ TITLE1‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪GRID‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪MESH MAX‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫‪SLABPROP‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪COLUMNPROP‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪WALLPROP‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪SOILPROP‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫‪POINT‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺧﻄﻲ‬ ‫‪LINE‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬ ‫‪AREA‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪BEAM‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ‬ ‫‪SLAB‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬ ‫‪OPENING‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪COLUMN‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ‐١‐٣‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪WALL‬‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪SOIL‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﺔ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ‬ ‫‪RELEASE‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪LOAD‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪POINTLOAD‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬ ‫‪POINTDISPL‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺧﻄﻲ‬ ‫‪LINELOAD‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬ ‫‪AREALOAD‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪COMBO‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪COMBOFACTOR‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬

‫‪X‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫‪XSTRIP‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫‪YSTRIP‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‬ ‫‪GROUP‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫‪END‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑـﻪ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻧـﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺳـﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳـﺎﻓﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﺧـﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑـﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪١‐٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻳـﻚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫"‪SAFE "7.01‬‬
‫‪UNITS Ton m‬‬
‫‪$ TITLES‬‬
‫"‪TITLE1 "Mat Foundation Design‬‬
‫"‪TITLE2 "Mat No. 1‬‬
‫‪$ GRIDS‬‬
‫‪GRID "GLOBAL" X "A" 0‬‬
‫‪GRID "GLOBAL" X "B" 8‬‬
‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

٦٤ SAFE ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬/ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
GRID "GLOBAL" X "C" 16

GRID "GLOBAL" X "D" 24
GRID "GLOBAL" Y "1" 0
GRID "GLOBAL" Z "" 0
MESH MAX 10
$ BEAM PROPERTIES
BEAMPROP "RBEAM" E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4
BEAMPROP "RBEAM" TYPE R B 0.3 D 0.6
BEAMPROP "RBEAM" DSNSEC 0
BEAMPROP "RBEAM" BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6
BEAMPROP "RBEAM" CT 0.075 CB 0.075
BEAMPROP "RBEAM" FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" TYPE T B 0.3 D 0.6 BB 0.3 BF 1.5 DS 0.2
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" DSNSEC 0
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6 BBDESIGN 0.3 BFDESIGN 0.6 DSDESIGN 0.2
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" CT 0.075 CB 0.075
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750
BEAMPROP "LBAEM" E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4
BEAMPROP "LBAEM" TYPE L B 0.3 D 0.6 BB 0.3 BF 1.5 DS 0.2
BEAMPROP "LBAEM" DSNSEC 0
BEAMPROP "LBAEM" BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6 BBDESIGN 0.3 BFDESIGN 0.6 DSDESIGN 0.2
BEAMPROP "LBAEM" CT 0.075 CB 0.075
BEAMPROP "LBAEM" FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750
BEAMPROP "GBEAM" E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4
BEAMPROP "GBEAM" TYPE G A 0.18 I 0.0054 AS 0.15 J 0.003708
BEAMPROP "GBEAM" DSNSEC 0
BEAMPROP "GBEAM" BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6 BBDESIGN 0.3 BFDESIGN 0.6 DSDESIGN 0.2
BEAMPROP "GBEAM" CT 0.075 CB 0.075
BEAMPROP "GBEAM" FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750
$ SLAB PROPERTIES
SLABPROP "SLAB1" E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4
SLABPROP "SLAB1" TII 0.2 TJJ 0.2 TIJ 0.2 TYPE THICK
SLABPROP "SLAB1" TDESIGN 0.2 CTI 0.04 CTJ 0.02 CBI 0.02 CBJ 0.04
SLABPROP "SLAB1" FC 2750 FY 40000
$ COLUMN PROPERTIES
COLUMNPROP "RCOL" TYPE R E 2500000 U 0.2 B 0.3 D 0.3 H 3
COLUMNPROP "RCOL" BCAP 0.8 DCAP 0.8 HCAP 0.5
COLUMNPROPABOVE "RCOL" E 2500000 U 0.2 B 0.3 D 0.3 H 3
COLUMNPROP "CCOL" TYPE C E 2500000 U 0.2 D 0.3 H 3
COLUMNPROP "SCOL" K 1 KXX 1 KYY 1
$ WALL PROPERTIES
WALLPROP "WALL" E 2500000 U 0.2 T 0.3 H 3
WALLPROPABOVE "WALL" E 2500000 U 0.2 T 0.3 H 3
WALLPROP "SWALL" K 1 KR 1
$ SOIL PROPERTIES
SOILPROP "SOIL1" K 2000
$ POINT COORDINATES
POINT "1" 8 16 UZ RX RY DIMX 0.5 DIMY 0.5
$ LINE CONNECTIVITY
LINE "1" 8 8 16 16
$ AREA CONNECTIVITY
AREA "1" 24 0 16 8 16 0 16 0
AREA "2" 0 0 8 0 8 8 0 8
$ BEAM ASSIGNS
BEAM "1" "GBEAM"
$ SLAB ASSIGNS
OPENING "1"
SLAB "2" "SLAB1"
$ COLUMN ASSIGNS
COLUMN "1" "RCOL"
SAFE ‫‐ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬١‐٣ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ‬

‫‪٦٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪$ WALL ASSIGNS‬‬

‫"‪WALL "1" "WALL‬‬
‫‪$ SOIL ASSIGNS‬‬
‫"‪SOIL "2" "SOIL1‬‬
‫‪$ RELEASE ASSIGNS‬‬
‫‪RELEASE "1" SHEAR MOMENT‬‬
‫‪$ LOADS‬‬
‫‪LOAD "DEAD" TYPE DEAD SELFWEIGHT 1 LTDFACTOR 3‬‬
‫‪POINTLOAD "DEAD" "1" F 50 MX 2 MY 2 XDIM 1 YDIM‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪POINTDISPL "DEAD" "1" UZ 0.001 RX 0.0001 RY 0.0001‬‬
‫‪LINELOAD "DEAD" "1" F 10 M3 2 M1 2‬‬
‫‪AREALOAD "DEAD" "2" W 1‬‬
‫‪LOAD "LIVE" TYPE LIVE SELFWEIGHT 1 LTDFACTOR 1‬‬
‫‪$ LOADING COMBINATIONS‬‬
‫"‪COMBO "DCON1" TYPE DESIGN "DCON1‬‬
‫‪COMBOFACTOR "DCON1" "DEAD" 1.4‬‬
‫‪COMBOFACTOR "DCON2" "LIVE" 1.7‬‬
‫‪$ STRIP DEFINITIONS‬‬
‫‪XSTRIP "3" 0 16 24 16 24 24 0 24‬‬
‫‪XSTRIP "4" 0 8 24 8 24 16 0 16‬‬
‫‪YSTRIP "5" 0 0 8 0 8 24 0 24‬‬
‫‪YSTRIP "6" 8 0 16 0 16 24 8 24‬‬
‫‪$ GROUPS‬‬
‫‪GROUP "TEST" LINE 1‬‬
‫‪GROUP "TEST" AREA 1‬‬
‫‪GROUP "TEST" AREA 2‬‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫‪$ END OF MODEL FILE‬‬
‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﺔ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴـﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﻧـﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢‐٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺧـﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢‐٣‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ POINTDISPL‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ POINT‬ﻛﻪ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻴﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬـﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧـﺴﺨﻪﻫـﺎﻱ ‪ 7.x‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﻗﺎﺑـﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ SAFE‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫"‪SAFE "7.01‬‬
‫‪SAFE‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪UNITS‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴـﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳـﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪) SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪ File > New Model...‬ﻭ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ ،(File > New Model from Template...‬ﻧﺨﺴﺘﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ SAFE‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽـﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ )ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.FDB‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﻣـﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ )ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.F2K‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨـﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٤‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ UNITS‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪UNITS Ton m‬‬
‫‪UNITS‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٤‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ TITLE1‬ﻭ ‪TITLE2‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻋـﻲ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻬـﺎ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣـﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ File > Print Output Tables ،File > Print Input Tables‬ﻭ ‪File > Print Design Tables‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪File‬‬
‫‪ > Print Setup...‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٥‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Print‬‬
‫‪ Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TITLE1‬‬
‫‪TITLE2‬‬
‫‪Print Setup‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٥‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ TITLE1‬ﻭ ‪ TITLE2‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٦‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ TITLE1‬ﻭ ‪ TITLE2‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪TITLE1‬‬ ‫"‪"Mat Foundation Design‬‬
‫‪TITLE2‬‬ ‫"‪"Mat No. 1‬‬
‫‪TITLE2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٦‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ TITLE1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪GRID‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Edit > Edit Grid...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٧‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Define X Grid‬ﻧـﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪GRID‬‬ ‫"‪"GLOBAL‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫"‪"A‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬

‫‪GRID‬‬ ‫"‪"GLOBAL‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫"‪"B‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬
‫‪GRID‬‬ ‫"‪"GLOBAL‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫"‪"C‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬
‫‪GRID‬‬ ‫"‪"GLOBAL‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫"‪"D‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬
‫‪Define X Grid‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٧‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ GRID‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٣‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪MESH MAX‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺓ ﺑﻴﺸﻴﻨﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Analyze > Set Options...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٨‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺧـﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ Analysis Options‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MESH MAX 10‬‬
‫‪Analysis Options‬‬ ‫‪ MESH‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪MAX‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٨‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳـﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪BEAMPROP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻴـﺮ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define > Beam Properties...‬ﻣـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮ ‪ T‬ﺷـﻜﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﺮ ‪ L‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ‪ ١١‐٣ ،١٠‐٣ ،٩‐٣‬ﻭ ‪ ،١٢‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮ ‪ T‬ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺮ ‪ L‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ xxx) Property Data for xxx Beam‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪BDESIGN‬‬
‫‪CT‬‬
‫‪DDESIGN‬‬
‫‪CB‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"RBEAM‬‬ ‫‪E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"RBEAM‬‬ ‫‪TYPE R B 0.3 D 0.6‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"RBEAM‬‬ ‫‪DSNSEC 0‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"RBEAM‬‬ ‫‪BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"RBEAM‬‬ ‫‪CT 0.075 CB 0.075‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"RBEAM‬‬ ‫‪FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٩‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ BEAMPROP‬ﺑﺎ‬

‫‪Property Data for Rectangular Beam‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
٧٠ SAFE ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬/ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4

BEAMPROP "TBEAM" TYPE T B 0.3 D 0.6 BB 0.3 BF 1.5 DS 0.2
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" DSNSEC 0
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6 BBDESIGN 0.3 BFDESIGN 0.6 DSDESIGN 0.2
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" CT 0.075 CB 0.075
BEAMPROP "TBEAM" FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750
BFDESIGN
DSDESIGN
CT
DDESIGN
CB
BBDESIGN
‫ ﺑﺎ‬BEAMPROP ‫‐ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬١٠‐٣ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

Property Data for T Beam ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
٧١ SAFE ‫ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬/ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
BEAMPROP "LBEAM" E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4

BEAMPROP "LBEAM" TYPE T B 0.3 D 0.6 BB 0.3 BF 1.5 DS 0.2
BEAMPROP "LBEAM" DSNSEC 0
BEAMPROP "LBEAM" BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6 BBDESIGN 0.3 BFDESIGN 0.6 DSDESIGN 0.2
BEAMPROP "LBEAM" CT 0.075 CB 0.075
BEAMPROP "LBEAM" FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750
BFDESIGN
DSDESIGN
CT
DDESIGN
CB
BBDESIGN
‫ ﺑﺎ‬BEAMPROP ‫‐ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬١١‐٣ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

Property Data for L Beam ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"GBEAM‬‬ ‫‪E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4‬‬

‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"GBEAM‬‬ ‫‪TYPE G A 0.18 I 0.0054 AS 0.15 J 0.003708‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"GBEAM‬‬ ‫‪DSNSEC 0‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"GBEAM‬‬ ‫‪BDESIGN 0.3 DDESIGN 0.6 BBDESIGN 0.3 BFDESIGN 0.6 DSDESIGN 0.2‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"GBEAM‬‬ ‫‪CT 0.075 CB 0.075‬‬
‫‪BEAMPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"GBEAM‬‬ ‫‪FC 2750 FY 40000 FYS 40000 FCS 2750‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٢‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ BEAMPROP‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪Property Data for General Beam‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ NULL‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪SLABPROP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬـﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define > Slab Properties...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،١٣‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Slab Property Data‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪SLABPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"SLAB1‬‬ ‫‪E 2500000 U 0.2 W 2.4‬‬

‫‪SLABPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"SLAB1‬‬ ‫‪TII 0.2 TJJ 0.2 TIJ 0.2 TYPE THICK‬‬
‫‪SLABPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"SLAB1‬‬ ‫‪TDESIGN 0.2 CTI 0.04 CTJ 0.02 CBI 0.02 CBJ 0.04‬‬
‫‪SLABPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"SLAB1‬‬ ‫‪FC 2750 FY 40000‬‬
‫‪Slab Property Data‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٣‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ SLABPROP‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪COLUMNPROP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define > Column Support...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ١٥‐٣ ،١٤‐٣‬ﻭ ‪ ١٦‐٣‬ﻧﺤـﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺑـﻴﻦ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌـﺎﺩﻝ ﺑـﺎ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ Column Support Property Data‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ SAFE‬ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ NULL‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪COLUMNPROP "RCOL" TYPE R E 2500000 U 0.2 B 0.3 D 0.3 H 3‬‬

‫‪COLUMNPROP "RCOL" BCAP 0.8 DCAP 0.8 HCAP 0.5‬‬
‫‪COLUMNPROPABOVE "RCOL" E 2500000 U 0.2 B 0.3 D 0.3 H 3‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٤‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COLUMNPROP‬ﺑﺎ‬

‫‪ Column‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪Support Property Data‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ )ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ،(.F2K‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﻛﺘﻴﺒـﻪﻫـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳـﻞ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ ﺑـﺎﻳﻨﺮﻱ ﻣـﺪﻝ )ﺑـﺎ ﭘـﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ (.FDB‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﻳـﺴﺖ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ ﻣـﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧـﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪COLUMNPROP‬‬ ‫"‪"CCOL‬‬ ‫‪DCAP 1.0‬‬ ‫‪HCAP 0.5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،DCAP ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻛﺘﻴﺒﻪ ﻭ ‪ HCAP‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪COLUMNPROP "CCOL" TYPE C E 2500000 U 0.2 D 0.3 H 3‬‬

‫‪COLUMNPROP "CCOL" DCAP 1.0 HCAP 0.5‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٥‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COLUMNPROP‬ﺑﺎ‬

‫‪ Column‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩﺍﻱ‬ ‫‪Support Property Data‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪COLUMNPROP "SCOL" K 1 KXX 1 KYY 1‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٦‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COLUMNPROP‬ﺑﺎ‬

‫‪ Column‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫‪Support Property Data‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪WALLPROP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define > Wall Support...‬ﻣﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ ١٧‐٣‬ﻭ ‪ ١٨‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Wall Support Property Data‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪WALLPROP "WALL" E 2500000 U 0.2 T 0.3 H 3‬‬

‫‪WALLPROPABOVE "WALL" E 2500000 U 0.2 T 0.3 H 3‬‬
‫‪Wall Support Property Data‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٧‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ WALLPROP‬ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪WALLPROP "SWALL" K 1 KR 1‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٨‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ WALLPROP‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪ Wall‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫‪Support Property Data‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪SOILPROP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define > Soil Support...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ١٩‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Soil Support Property Data‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOILPROP "SOIL1" K 2000‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٩‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ SOILPROP‬ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪Soil Support Property Data‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺑﻜـﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣـﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪POINT‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺘـﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤـﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﻱ ﻣﻘﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٠‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ POINT‬ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Point Object Information‬ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Point Object Information‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻣـﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪POINT "1" 8 16 UZ RX RY DIMX 0.5 DIMY 0.5‬‬
‫‪ßBóØ¤»Ð ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪×gw gá»Ì ßfBlD NCYjf‬‬

‫‪POINT "1" 8 16 UZ RX RY DIMX 0.5 DIMY 0.5‬‬
‫‪ßBóØ¤»Ð ÊrY NCzPdÌ‬‬ ‫‪àÚCÄóØá¿Q gá¼ fC¬IB‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٠‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ POINT‬ﻭ‬

‫‪Point Object Information‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪LINE‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘـﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤـﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢١‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ‪ LINE‬ﻭ ﻧﺤـﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Line Object Information‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Line‬‬
‫‪ Object Information‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪LINE "1" 8 8 16 16‬‬
‫‪à¤e ÊrY àâBgPIB Ö¤»Ð NCzPdÌ‬‬

‫‪à¤e ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪à¤e ÊrY àâCÙPÐB Ö¤»Ð NCzPdÌ‬‬
‫‪LINE "1" 8 8 16 16‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢١‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ LINE‬ﻭ‬
‫‪Line Object Information‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٥‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪AREA‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘـﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤـﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴـﺮﻱ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٢‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ‪ AREA‬ﻭ ﻧﺤـﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Quad Slab Information‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Quad Slab‬‬
‫‪ Information‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٠‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪AREA "1" 24 0 16 8 16 0 16 0‬‬
‫‪àTÇTÌ à`¤s ÊrY ßBóØwÔÄ ¥C»Ð NCzPdÌ‬‬
‫‪à`¤s ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬
‫‪AREA "1" 24 0 16 8 16 0 16 0‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٢‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ AREA‬ﻭ‬
‫‪Quad Slab Information‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪BEAM‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺟـﺴﻢ ﺧﻄـﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ ﻭﻳﮋﮔـﻲ ﺗﻴـﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ > ‪Assign‬‬
‫‪ Beam Properties...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺗﺨـﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٣‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ BEAM‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪à¤e ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬

‫"‪BEAM "1" "GBEAM‬‬
‫‪káQ àÄoâÓ Gr]kI‬‬
‫‪BEAM‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٣‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪SLAB‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳـﻄﺤﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ ﻭﻳﮋﮔـﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪Assign > Slab‬‬
‫‪ Properties...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺨـﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ ،٢٤‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ SLAB‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪SLAB "2" "SLAB1‬‬
‫‪ÅBf àÄoâÓ Gr]kI‬‬
‫‪SLAB‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٤‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪OPENING‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Assign > Opening‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺯﺷﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٥‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ‪ OPENING‬ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪OPENING "1‬‬
‫‪OPENING‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٥‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪COLUMN‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺳـﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Assign > Column‬‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ Supports...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ‬
‫‪ ،٢٦‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COLUMN‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ßBóØ¤»Ð ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬
‫"‪COLUMN "1" "RCOL‬‬
‫‪ÍÔPs àÄoâÓ Gr]kI‬‬
‫‪COLUMN‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٦‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪WALL‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ ﻭﻳﮋﮔـﻲ ﺩﻳـﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺑـﺎ ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ > ‪Assign‬‬
‫‪ Wall Supports...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺗﺨـﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٧‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ WALL‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪WALL "1" "WALL‬‬
‫‪jBÔâf àÄoâÓ Gr]kI‬‬
‫‪WALL‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٧‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪SOIL‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻭﻳﮋﮔـﻲ ﺑـﺴﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ > ‪Assign‬‬
‫‪ Soil Supports...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺨـﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٨‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ SOIL‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫"‪SOIL "2" "SOIL1‬‬
‫‪à®CXQjB kPrI àÄoâÓ Gr]kI‬‬
‫‪SOIL‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٨‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٧‐٦‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪RELEASE‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜـﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪Assign > Releases...‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺆﻟﻔﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺗﺨـﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٢٩‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ RELEASE‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈـﻮﺭ ﻣـﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﺤـﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Line Object Information‬ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١‐٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈـﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪RELEASE "1" SHEAR MOMENT‬‬
‫‪àâÓkáÐ Ö¶ÈÒÌ ßlCs fBlD ªÔÐ‬‬
‫‪RELEASE‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٩‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪LOAD‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑـﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳـﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧـﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻟـﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺭﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define > Static Load Cases...‬ﻣـﻲﺗـﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨـﺼﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔـﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٠‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ Static Load Case Names‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪LOAD "DEAD" TYPE DEAD SELFWEIGHT 1 LTDFACTOR 3‬‬

‫‪LOAD "LIVE" TYPE LIVE SELFWEIGHT 1 LTDFACTOR 1‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٠‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ LOAD‬ﺑﺎ‬

‫‪Static Load Case Names‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪POINTLOAD‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜـﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪Assign > Point Loads...‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺗﺨـﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪،٣١‐٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ POINTLOAD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳـﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Point Object Information‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٠‐٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ßjBiÄjCI OÈCa Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪mÀkËPÌ ßCÚjCI NCzdvÌ‬‬
‫‪POINTLOAD "DEAD" "1" F 50 MX 2 MY 2 XDIM 1 YDIM 1‬‬
‫‪ßBóØ¤»Ð ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪mÀkËPÌ jCI fC¬IB‬‬

‫‪POINTLOAD‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣١‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪POINTDISPL‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜـﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪Assign > Point‬‬
‫‪ Displacements...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺸﺴﺖ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٢‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ POINTDISPL‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪،Point Object Information‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٠‐٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ßjBiÄjCI OÈCa Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪àÚCÄóØá¿Q OrvÐ ßCÚjCI NCzdvÌ‬‬
‫‪POINTDISPL "DEAD" "1" UZ 0.001 RX 0.0001 RY 0.0001‬‬
‫‪ßBóØ¤»Ð ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬

‫‪POINTDISPL‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٢‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٤‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪LINELOAD‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜـﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪Assign > Line Loads...‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٣‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ LINELOAD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﺤـﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒـﺎﻁ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪ ،Line Object Information‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١‐٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ßjBiÄjCI OÈCa Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪à¤e ßCÚjCI NCzdvÌ‬‬
‫‪LINELOAD "DEAD" "1" F 10 M3 2 M1 2‬‬

‫‪LINELOAD‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٣‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٥‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪AREALOAD‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﺓ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺗﺨـﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜـﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ > ‪Assign‬‬
‫‪ Surface Loads...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﺓ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈـﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ ﺳـﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨـﺎﺏ ﺷـﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٤‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ AREALOAD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ﺑـﺎ ﺟﻌﺒـﺔ ﻣﺤـﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪،Quad Object Information‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢٢‐٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ßjBiÄjCI OÈCa Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪×fkPrÄ OeBÔÏ¿â jCI NCzdvÌ‬‬

‫‪AREALOAD "DEAD" "1" W 0‬‬

‫‪AREALOAD‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٤‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ ‐٦‐٧‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COMBO‬ﻭ ‪COMBOFACTOR‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺿـﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤـﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜـﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣـﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳـﻂ ﺩﺳـﺘﻮﺭ ‪Define > Load‬‬
‫‪ Combinations...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷـﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٥‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻄ ـﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋــﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COMBO‬ﻭ ‪ COMBOFACTOR‬ﻭ ﻧﺤــﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒــﺎﻁ ﺁﻥ ﺑــﺎ ﺟﻌﺒــﺔ ﻣﺤــﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ ‪Load‬‬
‫‪ Combination Data‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪COMBOFACTOR "DCON2" "LIVE" 1.7‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٥‐٣‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ COMBO‬ﻭ ‪ COMBOFACTOR‬ﺑﺎ‬

‫‪Load Combination Data‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷـﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‐١‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ XSTRIP‬ﻭ ‪YSTRIP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺮﭼـﺴﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘـﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘـﺎﻁ ﮔﻮﺷـﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺟـﺴﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٦‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪ XSTRIP‬ﻭ ‪ YSTRIP‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪àÇá¤PrÌ à`¤s ÊrY ßBóØwÔÄ ¥C»Ð NCzPdÌ‬‬
‫‪àaBk¥ jBÔÐ Gr]kI‬‬

‫‪XSTRIP‬‬ ‫"‪"3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪16 24 16 24 24 0 24‬‬
‫‪XSTRIP‬‬ ‫"‪"4‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪8 24 8 24 16 0 16‬‬
‫‪YSTRIP‬‬ ‫"‪"5‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0 8 0 8 24 0 24‬‬
‫‪YSTRIP‬‬ ‫"‪"6‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪0 16 0 16 24 8 24‬‬
‫‪YSTRIP‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٦‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ XSTRIP‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ‐٢‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪GROUP‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﺓ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺟـﺴﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﻠـﻖ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪ ،SAFE‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Define > Groups...‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Assign > Group Names...‬ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﻬـﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،٣٧‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪ GROUP‬ﻧﻤـﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪×ÓkÄ Gr]kI‬‬ ‫‪ÊrY Gr]kI‬‬
‫‪GROUP "TEST" LINE 1‬‬

‫‪ÊrY ªÔÐ‬‬
‫‪GROUP‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٣٧‐٣‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬
‫‪ ‐٣‐٨‐٣‬ﺧﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪END‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧـﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋـﺎﺗﻲ ‪ END‬ﺍﺳـﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

SAP2 Ex SAFE

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAP2 Ex SAFE

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫‪ ‐١‐١‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪٤ ......................................................................................................... SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫‪ ‐٤‐٧‐١‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻟﻨﮕﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮ ﭘﻲ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ( ‪٤٢..............................‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫‪ ‐١‐٢‬ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻟﺴﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺘﻨﻲ ‪٥١....................................................................................‬‬

‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ‪ :‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪SAFE‬‬

‫‪ ‐٥‐٤‐٣‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ‪٧٧............................................................................................ SOILPROP‬‬

‫‪ ‐١‐١‬ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫‪ ‐٢‐١‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2exSAFE‬‬

‫‪ ‐٣‐١‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2000‬‬

‫‪ ‐٤‐١‬ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ ‪SAP2000 V9, 10 &11‬‬

‫‪ ‐٥‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‐١‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫‪ ‐٢‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫‪ ‐٣‐٤‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫‪ ‐٤‐٤‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Display > Show All Table Types...‬‬

‫‪.fÔw FCdPÐB CÚóÅBf ßBkI‬‬

‫‪.fÔw FCdPÐB CÚóàM ßBkI‬‬

‫‪Output Options‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٥‐١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬

‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٦‐١‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫‪ÅÔÇs ÎâB ßÓj‬‬

‫‪ ‐٥‐٤‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬

‫‪ Splits‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٨‐١‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٩‐١‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫‪WordPad‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٠‐١‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

.‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬V11.x

Table: Analysis Case Definitions

Case Type InitialCond ModalCase

Table: Joint Coordinates

1 GLOBAL Cartesian 0.000 -360.000 0.000 No 0.000 360.000 0.000

Table: Joint Reactions

Joint OutputCase CaseType U1 U2 U3 R1 R2 R3

1 DL LinStatic 3.123E-16 5.216 145.004 -281.666 1.686E-14 0.000

SAP2000 V8.x ‫‐ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬٥‐١

‫‪ ‐٥‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ‐١‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫‪ ‐٢‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‬

‫‪ ‐٣‐٥‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٢‐١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫‪ ‐٤‐٥‐١‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪Display > Show All Table Types...‬‬

‫‪Output Options‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٨‐١‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭﻩﺍﻱ‬

‫‪àÐCÌl Ö\dâjCQ àÇáÇ`Q OÈCa ßBkI‬‬

‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐١٩‐١‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫‪ÅÔÇs ÎâB ßÓj‬‬

‫‪ ‐٥‐٥‐١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪SAP2000‬‬

‫‪ Splits‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ٢١‐١‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪SAP2000‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٢‐١‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ‬

‫‪WordPad‬‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ‐٢٣‐١‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ SAP2000‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬

.‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬V8.x

Table: Analysis Case Definitions

Case Type InitialCond ModalCase

Table: Joint Coordinates

1 GLOBAL Cartesian 0.000 -360.000 0.000 No 0.000 360.000 0.000

Table: Joint Reactions

Joint OutputCase CaseType U1 U2 U3 R1 R2 R3

1 DL LinStatic 3.123E-16 5.216 145.004 -281.666 1.686E-14 0.000

SAP2000 V8 ‫‐ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬٢٤‐١ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

SAP2000 V7.x ‫‐ ﻧﺤﻮﺓ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺔ‬٦‐١

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬